OWNER’S MANUAL
2013
2013 FIAT 500
13FF500-126-AF Sixth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FIAT 500
FCA US LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................83
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................139
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................215
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................289
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................327
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................383
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................389
10
INDEX .....................................................................399
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be as-
sured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc-
tive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are
traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that
FCA US LLC offers to its customers:
• the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity
• the range of additional services available to FCA US
LLC customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
studio knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on
the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............11
▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................11
▫ Locking Doors With A Key................13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................13
䡵 SENTRY KEY® .........................13
▫ Replacement Keys .....................14
▫ General Information ....................15
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................15
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........16
▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press...............................16
▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function .......17
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............18
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters........19
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........19
▫ General Information ....................21
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................21
▫ Power Door Locks .....................23
䡵 POWER WINDOWS .....................24
2
▫ Power Window Switches .................24
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................25
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS ................27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....35
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ......35
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped ............................36
▫ Energy Management Feature ..............37
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ..................37
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) ..........................38
▫ Seat Belt Extender .....................39
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ...........39
▫
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags. .40
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features ...........42
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls ....46
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............55
▫ Child Restraints .......................56
▫ Transporting Pets ......................76
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....77
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................77
▫ Transporting Passengers..................77
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................78
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................79
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ..........................81
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical
key simply press the mechanical key release button .
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the autho-
rized studio that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Mechanical Key Release Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push
ignition button to place ignition in OFF position.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock your ve-
hicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 3 — AVV (START)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the
key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK, sounds a
signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some after-market remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
This PIN is required for authorized studio replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized studio. This procedure consists of program-
ming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key
is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized studio.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice,
within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key
Release Button
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Power Top Remote Function
The remote keyless power top function can only be used
with the engine off.
NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be
used to open the power top to the spoiler position.
Opening Power Top Remote Function:
1. OPEN — Push and hold the unlock button down on
the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate
Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening when-
ever the unlock button on the key fob is released, or
when it reaches the spoiler position
NOTE: If your power convertible top does not open with
the remote, please refer to the ⬙Power Convertible Top
Relearn Procedure” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for additional information.
Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you:
• Before operating the power top, make sure that no
moving parts of the convertible top can injure a
person or animal.
• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the convertible top components, the upper wind-
shield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or
the convertible top stowage area while raising or
lowering the convertible top.
• When using the power top button on RKE trans-
mitter, if potential danger exists while lowering the
top, release the button immediately to interrupt the
operation.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top
completely closed and latched or fully lowered into
its stowage compartment.
• Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in
motion.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal. If a door is ajar the turn signal lights will flash at
an increased rate and there will be no horn chirp, this is
to indicate that a door is still ajar.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized studio for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Press the mechanical key release button and release
the mechanical key to access the battery case screw
located on the side of the Key Fob.
Mechanical Key Release Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob
using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
Key Fob Screw Location
Battery Case Removed
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from
inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door
handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the
door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed,
the door will lock.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
(Continued)
Door Lock Handle
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is incorporated into the door
handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate. If the door handle is pushed a red lock
indicator will show on the door handle (indicating
locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock.
NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the
vehicle, the power door lock switch will not operate
when the key is in the ignition and either front door is
open. A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
key.
Driver Power Door Lock Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Autoclose — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
To change the setting proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button “On” or “Off” will
flash on the display (according to the previous set-
ting).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Vehicle” for further information.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls located on the shifter
bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the
driver and passenger door windows. The window con-
trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down — If Equipped
The driver’s door window switch may have an Auto-
Down feature. Press the window switch for approxi-
mately one second, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down move-
ment, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock
switches located on the front door handles.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Liftgate Handle
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for Children (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to “LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage
System (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children).”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle
has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC and
SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in
⬙If You Need Consumer Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Side air bags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
(Continued)
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
•
A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter-
nal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
Positioning Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized studio immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re-
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver Passenger
First Row N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly re-
strained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
pants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
rized studio. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
studio can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag
2 — Knee Bolster
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations for Ad-
vanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to allow the
air bags to have different inflation levels based on several
factors, including the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation level of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABIC is labeled SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SAB are marked with
an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front
seats.
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized studio immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The SAB are marked with an air bag label
sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
may offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the
body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers,
placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant,
that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries.
The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows
on the impact side.
NOTE: Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
and SABIC during impacts that require air bag occupant
protection.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil-
dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
body outside of the window.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Knee Impact Bolster
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve
occupant protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemen-
tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat belt pretensioners, as
required, depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of impact.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
collisions depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear or side
collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. If the key is in the OFF/
LOCK position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system
is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized studio service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover
separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to
inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about
15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in
the side of the air bag.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC
will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the
vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is
inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event, the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
After the event occurs, when the system is active, the
message ⬙Fuel Cutoff See Handbook⬙ is displayed.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
System Reset Procedure
After an impact causing air bag deployment, the left and
right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel
cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned
off. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road
you must follow the system reset procedure.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Customer Action Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be
placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition ON. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF.
8. Turn ignition OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually).
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45
seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC - if equipped air bags may deploy on both sides of
the vehicle.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized studio
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized studio for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized studio. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized studio.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized studio service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the Body Control Module (BCM) fuse block inside
the vehicle for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on
the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized studio if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower an-
chorages?
N/A
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, all.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manu-
facturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, all.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
a better fit.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon-
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position (see the
charts above), move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
(Continued)
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
studio. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
studio.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized studio for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED . .86
▫ Lowering The Power Top.................86
▫ Raising The Power Top ..................87
▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure .....88
▫ Wind Stop ...........................89
䡵 MIRRORS .............................89
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror .................89
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .90
▫ Power Mirrors ........................91
▫ Folding Mirrors........................93
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............93
▫ Sun Visors ...........................93
䡵 BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................94
▫ Overview ............................94
▫ The Hands-Free Kit .....................95
䡵 SEATS ..............................101
▫ Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . .101
▫ Recline Adjustment ....................102
▫ Seat Height Adjustment .................103
3
▫ EZ Entry Feature ......................104
▫ Memory Feature ......................104
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............105
▫ Head Restraints .......................106
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........108
䡵 LIGHTS .............................110
▫ Multifunction Lever ....................110
▫ Headlights ..........................110
▫ High Beams .........................111
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................111
▫ Parking Lights .......................111
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....111
▫ Turn Signals .........................111
▫ Lane Change Assist ....................112
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .........112
▫ Interior Lights .......................113
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...........114
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......115
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation .........115
▫ Rear Windshield Wiper .................117
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . .118
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........119
▫ To Activate ..........................120
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................120
▫ To Deactivate ........................121
▫ To Resume Speed .....................121
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............121
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................121
䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ........122
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors ................122
▫ Rear Park Assist Alerts..................123
▫ Failure Indications .....................125
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System .......125
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions .......126
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........127
▫ To Open ............................128
▫ To Close ............................129
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................129
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................129
▫ Emergency Operation...................129
▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped ...............130
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........130
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED ..........133
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................134
䡵 STORAGE ............................135
▫ Glove Box Compartment ................135
▫ Passenger Seat Storage — If Equipped.......135
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................136
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............137
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................137
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED
On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the
power convertible top switch is located on the overhead
console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger
side button, is used to open the power top, and the driver
side button, is used to close the power top.
NOTE:
• The power top buttons will operate when the ignition
switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The power top can be remotely operated with the key
fob. Refer to “Opening Power Top Remote Function”
in “Things To Know Before Starting” for more infor-
mation.
Lowering The Power Top
Auto Open
Push the top open button approximately one second for
the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top
open button for approximately one second a second time
to fully open the convertible top.
Manual Open
For manual open, push and hold the open button until
desired roof position or until spoiler position.
Power Convertible Top Switch
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Vertical movement only operates in auto open/
close mode.
Raising The Power Top
Auto Close
From the convertible top fully open position, push the
top close button for approximately one second for the
three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close
button for approximately one second a second time for
the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close
button to fully close convertible top.
Manual Close
For manual close, push and hold the close button until
desired position until one-quarter open position. Push
and hold again for full close position.
NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000
cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for information.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam-
age the top material. Also, increased water pressure
may force water past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the top
is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles
interior.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicles interior.
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is impor-
tant that all occupants wear their seat belts at all
times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are
ejected from the vehicle during a collision.
Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure
If your power convertible top does not operate in the
Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/
closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open
comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top
function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open -
the following relearn procedure may be necessary.
1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed.
2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using
manual mode).
3. Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully
open position.
4. CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an addi-
tional three seconds.
5. Release the OPEN button.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully
closed position.
7. CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top
begins to cycle fully open, then release the CLOSED
button.
At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the
fully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open
position.
This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success-
ful.
Auto Open/Close will now be functional. Trunk lid
operation will be functional. Remote Keyless Power Top
Function will be functional.
NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity.
If the power convertible top does not relearn repeat the
procedure a second time.
Wind Stop
The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle.
The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top opera-
tion. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select
switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Power Mirror Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
mirror, press the mirror select switch to either the L (left)
or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Spotter Mirror — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter
mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of
visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Spotter Mirror
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles may
not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case
the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun
visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors.
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION —
IF EQUIPPED
Overview
Windows Mobile™-based FIAT BLUE&ME™ is a per-
sonal telematic system enabling you to use communica-
tion and entertainment applications expressly designed
for use in the car.
The BLUE&ME™ system installed on your car is
equipped with a hands-free kit, message reader and
media player, and it is preset for future installation of
additional services.
The BLUE&ME™ system, fully integrated with voice
commands, buttons on the steering wheel and multifunc-
tion display messages, gives you the possibility of inter-
acting with your Bluetooth® wireless technology mobile
phone (even if you keep it in your pocket or bag) without
having to take your eyes off the road or remove your
hands from the steering wheel. To use voice commands
you are not required to train the voice recognition system
to recognize your voice. This implies that the system is
nearly equally performing with different persons, i.e.: the
voice recognition system is of the “speaker independent”
type.
With this system you can also play your favorite music
stored on USB device and select tracks and playback
modes with both voice commands or buttons on the
steering wheel.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules
subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept all interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Hands-Free Kit
The basic characteristic of this hands-free kit is voice
recognition with Bluetooth® wireless technology. With
this system you can make and receive calls safely and
securely by using either voice commands or buttons on
the steering wheel. This can be done under any driving
condition without ever having to take your eyes off the
road or remove your hands from the steering wheel, as
required by current laws.
Bluetooth® wireless technology enables wireless connec-
tion between your mobile phone and the hands-free kit
installed on your car.
To use the hands-free kit, you need a Bluetooth® wireless
technology enabled mobile phone. This hands-free kit
gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your
mobile phone while driving, even if your mobile device
does not feature this capability. You can also interact with
your mobile phone manually and visually using the
steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multi-
function display.
1 — Mute/ESC 2 — Phone/Menu
4 — Voice Recognition (VR) 3 — Phone Hang Up
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
To get started with BLUE&ME™ hands-free kit with
voice recognition, you have to simply pair your
Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled mobile phone
with the system.
Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once.
NOTE:
• During the mobile phone pairing procedure,
BLUE&ME™ attempts to detect a phone equipped
with Bluetooth® wireless technology within range and
then establishes the connection using a Personal Iden-
tification Number (PIN).
• Once your phone is paired, you have the option to
transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands-free
kit, to make a phone call either by using the contacts
list or directly pronouncing the phone number, to
answer a call and also to answer another incoming
phone call.
• To interact with BLUE&ME™ you can use either the
buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands.
With voice recognition, you can perform system func-
tions by speaking voice commands, also identified as
“keywords”. When the system recognizes a keyword,
it will respond with the appropriate action. Voice
recognition is an easy and convenient way to use
BLUE&ME™.
All the system functions are available within the
BLUE&ME™ Main Menu. When the car is not moving,
you can scroll through the complete menu by using either
the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands.
When you are travelling, you can interact with
BLUE&ME™ by using the buttons on the steering wheel
or voice commands relevant only to phone functions
(LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK ) and the media
player. To activate settings when travelling you can only
use voice commands.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The hands-free kit enables the following operations:
• Contact Calling By Voice — you can call a contact in
your mobile phone phonebook using your voice. You
can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning
through the entries on the multifunction display. (To
use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone
contacts to the hands-free kit phonebook).
• Digit Dialing By Voice — you can dial a phone
number by pressing the VR button on the steering
wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed.
• To Call The SMS Text Sender — call directly the last
SMS text sender or the sender of a message received
and stored in the BLUE&ME™ inbox.
• To Answer A Call — you can answer an incoming call
by pressing the MENU/Phone button on the steering
wheel.
• Conference Call — you can call another contact while
you are engaged in a phone conversation (with
Bluetooth® phones supporting this option).
• Call Waiting — while engaged in a phone conversa-
tion, you can receive notification of another incoming
phone call, answer the other incoming phone call, and
switch between two ongoing phone conversations.
(Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compat-
ible mobile phones).
• Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call — you can
refuse an incoming call or end a current call by
pressing the Phone Hang-up button on the steering
wheel.
After pairing and connecting your phone with the
BLUE&ME™ system, you can make phone calls by
speaking keywords or pressing buttons on the steering
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
wheel. When using the hands-free phone, the audio
output of a phone conversation is heard through your car
sound speakers.
Message Reader
The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables automatic
reading, through the car sound system, of the SMS texts
you receive on your Bluetooth® wireless technology
mobile phone that are received when the phone is paired
and connected to BLUE&ME™ system. It does not pro-
vide access to messages that were received before the
device was connected with the BLUE&ME™ system. The
message reader will also interpret any abbreviation and
emoticon contained in the SMS text.
NOTE: Not all mobile phones support the SMS text
message reader function or automatic phonebook trans-
fer via Bluetooth®. Consult www.fiatusa.com for further
information on the list of compatible mobile phones.
Message reader functions are managed by the control
buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE&ME™
voice commands.
The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables the following
operations:
• To display an indicator on the instrument panel that
indicates you have received a new SMS text. It will
display the sender’s number/name and will ask you
whether to read the text of the message to you.
• To manage the list of SMS texts received on your
BLUE&ME™ paired mobile phone.
• To read the messages received and stored. Messages
can be read multiple times.
• To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the
steering wheel or voice commands.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To delete individual messages or the entire inbox using
the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands.
The BLUE&ME™ system can also recognize and read
abbreviations, if any (e.g. “ILUVU” will be read like “I
love you”) and interpret the most usual emoticons (e.g. :-)
will be read like “Smile”), that are currently used to write
SMS texts.
Media Player
With the BLUE&ME™ media player you can play, the
digital audio files stored on a USB device by simply
connecting it to the USB port located in the glove box of
the car.
In this way, while you are driving you can play your
favorite music collections.
• iPod® Player — see dedicated paragraph under Me-
dia Player Functions.
The media player enables the following operations:
• Digital Audio Playback — you can play all your
digital audio files (.mp3,.wma,.wav,.aac) or play a
customized playlist (.m3u or. wpl format).
• Audio File Selection By Category — you can play all
audio files of a certain category, e.g.: album, artist or
genre.
• Playback Options — while playing tracks you can
select the following options: Play, Stop, Next track,
Previous track, Shuffle and Loop track.
NOTE:
• The media player does not support audio files com-
pressed with other formats and DRM (Digital Right
Management) protected audio files. Non-supported
audio files that may be present on the USB device will
be ignored.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
• To use the media player, you have to simply connect
(directly or by an extension lead) your USB device to
the car USB port. After turning the ignition key to ON,
BLUE&ME™ will start building your media library. At
the end of this operation you can surf the complete
library and scroll its categories as required using the
buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands.
BLUE&ME™ will then play your selection via the car
sound system.
WARNING!
• Operating certain parts of this system while driv-
ing can distract your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other serious
consequences; for this reason certain functions
shall be disabled by the BLUE&ME™ system until
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
driving conditions are secure and, if required, only
when the car is stopped.
• Read and Follow Instructions: before using your
system, read and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this “User’s Guide”. Not
following precautions found in this User’s Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious conse-
quences.
• Keep the User’s Guide in the car: when kept in the
car, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the system.
Please make certain that before using the system
for the first time, all persons have access to the
User’s Guide and read its instructions and safety
information carefully.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Your vehicle may be equipped with either an adjusting
handle or adjusting bar that is located at the front of the
seats, near the floor.
Adjusting Handle — If Equipped
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the adjusting handle or
bar and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the
adjusting handle or bar once the desired position is
reached. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recline Adjustment
The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline
lever, lean back until the desired position has been
reached, and release the lever.
Adjusting Bar — If Equipped
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump
the lever downward to lower the seat height.
Recline Lever
Height Adjuster
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
EZ Entry Feature
The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry
feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the
release lever, located on the outboard side of the seatback,
dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward
to allow access in and out of the rear seat.
Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to
its locked position once the rear passengers are seated.
Memory Feature
The driver seat also has a memory feature, which can
operate in two ways:
Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back And
Track Fore/Aft Position Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and
the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the
position they were most recently adjusted to. This is
accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its
last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is
returned upright.
Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only
Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first
be returned upright prior to going back to the last
EZ Entry Lever
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in
the seat back memory being set only – The track will then
be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory posi-
tion. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to
reestablish memory function option 1), the seat has to be
returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track
position as described in Memory function option 1.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
Press the switch once to turn on the heated
seats. Press the switch a second time to shut the
heating elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear-
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact
the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend
forward minimizing the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to
their normal position following a rear impact. If the
Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal
position, see your authorized studio immediately.
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized studio.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Push Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Vehicle” for information on tether routing.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located
on the left kick panel, rearward.
Push Button
Hood Release Lever
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the
hood, near the center, and raise the hood.
Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left side
when standing in front of the hood) of the engine
compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of
hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position.
In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop
rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm)
approximately and then drop it. This should secure
both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Hood Safety Latch Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up-
ward to the first detent for headlight operation.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Headlight Operation
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multi-
function lever towards the instrument panel to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRL.
The DRL function can be turned on or off using the
display menus. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Turn Signals
Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right
turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspond-
ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to
indicate the operation of the turn signal.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when
the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is
returned to a straight position.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to
a maximum of 210 seconds.
Turn Signal Operation
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the left overhead, press the switch to
the right from its center position and the lights are always
on. Press the switch to the left from its center position and
the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center
position, and the lights are turned on and off when the
doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side
of the overhead console controls the map or reading
function of the lights. Press the switch to the right to turn
on the right light and press the switch to the left to turn
on the left light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
• When one door is opened a 3 minute timer is activated.
• When the key is removed from the ignition (within
two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are unlocked with Key Fob a 10
second timer is activated.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
• When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights
will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
• When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is
activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, just below the radio.
Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Press
the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes:
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers
will operate intermittently.
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent
but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed.
As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease.
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The
wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the
wipers will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rear Windshield Wiper
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever
upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for intermittent wipe operation. With the front wind-
shield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield
wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate
in the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at
half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into
REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at
Low Speed and return to normal operation when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Rear Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and
hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers
will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever
is released.
TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on
the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal
controls.
Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock
the column firmly in place.
Tilt Control Lever
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the
set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indica-
tion of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System
Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and
recommendations.
Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance
from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the au-
dible alert becomes more frequent.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the
rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would
clear the underside of the car during the parking maneu-
ver.
Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear
is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the dis-
tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succes-
sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12
in (30 cm) away.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the
sensors’ field of view
Audible signal (dashboard loud-
speaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate
that increases as the distance de-
creases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 in
(30 cm)
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer
to “Menu Functions” for further
information).
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on multi-
function display (where provided).
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the
distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this
condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is
turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during
maneuvers parallel to walls).
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the
instrument panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
is displayed on the multifunction display (if
equipped). Refer to “Instrument Cluster De-
scriptions” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display
shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavail-
able, without reference to the sensor in failure condition.
If even a single sensor fails, the entire system must be
disabled. The system is turned off automatically.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the va-
por jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in (10
cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
• Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
(Continued)
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead
console.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
To Open
Press and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for
approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at
the vented position. Press the switch a second time and
Power Sunroof Switch
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
hold for approximately one second and release, the
sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation,
any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
To Close
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power
sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second,
the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the
switch a second time and hold for approximately one
second to completely close the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Emergency Operation
In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated
with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box.
There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening
at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert
the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the
desired location.
Sun Shade — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a
fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or
closed. To open the sun shade press the tab and move the
shade to a full open position.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet,
located in the floor console, for added convenience. This
power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and
other low power devices.
Manual Sun Shade
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or
accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the
heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood
F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned
off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
CUPHOLDERS
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo-
cated on the floor console between the front seats.
For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the
floor between the front driver and passenger seats.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Box Compartment
The glove box is located on the right side of the instru-
ment panel. Pull outward on the door latch to open the
glove box. Push the glove box door upward to close it.
Passenger Seat Storage — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the
front passenger seat. Pull outward on the latch to open
the storage compartment.
Glove Box Compartment
Passenger Seat Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow
increased cargo capacity.
Push down the release button, located at the outboard
top of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded-
down position to provide a flat load floor cargo area.
When returning the seatback to its upright position, push
rearward until the seatback is properly latched.
Rear Seat Release Buttons
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located in the
center of the instrument panel, below the radio.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster.
An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes.
To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Folded Rear Seats
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........141
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE,
500C ................................142
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SPORT..........142
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....144
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) ..............................156
▫ EVIC Displays........................157
▫ EVIC Control Buttons ..................158
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu .........................158
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System ........160
▫ Trip Computer .......................161
▫ Trip Button ..........................161
▫ Trip Functions ........................162
▫ Values Displayed ......................163
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)............................164
䡵 SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO ..............174
▫ Introduction .........................174
▫ Suggestions..........................175
4
▫ Technical Specifications .................177
▫ Quick Guide .........................178
▫ General Information....................181
▫ Functions And Adjustments ..............182
▫ Radio ..............................190
▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped......191
▫ CD Player ...........................194
▫ CD MP3 Player .......................197
▫ Troubleshooting.......................199
䡵 iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................200
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......201
▫ Radio Operation ......................202
▫ CD Player Operation ...................202
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)...........................203
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........203
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .203
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................204
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ......204
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ...........................207
▫ Operating Tips .......................213
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Side Vent 7 — Passenger Air Bag 13 — Storage Compartment
2 — Multifunction Lever – Light Control 8 — Glove Compartment 14 — Shift Lever
3 — Instrument Cluster And Warning
Lights
9 — Rear Defrost Button 15 — Sport Button
4 — Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Com-
puter
10 — Hazard Button 16 — Horn/Driver Airbag
5 — Central Air Vents 11 — Climate Controls
6 — Storage Compartment/Radio 12 — Power Windows Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE, 500C
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SPORT
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the
ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. The Glow Plug
light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10
seconds. An externally powered electric engine block
heater is available as optional equipment or from your
authorized studio).
The message ⬙Plug In Engine Heater⬙, will be displayed
in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature
is below 5°F (-15°C) at the time the engine is shut off as
a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
2. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear
window defroster. This indicator will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
4. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.0
gallon (3.8L) this light will turn on, and remain on
until fuel is added.
5. High Beam Indicator
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator / Follow Me Home
(Headlight Delay) Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on. If the Follow
Me Home feature is activated this indicator
will illuminate and the EVIC will show how
long the function remains active. For further information,
refer to “Follow Me Home” in “Understanding The
Features of Your Vehicle”.
7. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exte-
rior turn signal, when using the turn signal
lever.
8. Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if
any of the following conditions occur: Oil
Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Intervention,
Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor Failure.
9. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
studio as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
10. Cruise On Indicator — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel.”
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on if the driver’s seat belt
is unbuckled, a chime will sound. When driving,
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
12. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized studio.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
13. Power Steering System Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical
warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
14. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized studio for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
rized studio.
15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
16. Automatic Gearbox Failure
This light will illuminate when there is an
automatic transmission fault.
17. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBDII, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF/LOCK
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
19. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. The engine coolant temperature indicator
will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the Brake Warning Light turns
on it may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the brake system reservoir.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF/LOCK position
to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized studio.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
21. Electronic Stability Control OFF (ESC OFF) Indica-
tor Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
driver.
22. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation / Mal-
function Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on for
four seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on con-
tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on,
see your authorized studio as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized studio.
24. Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors or the trunk may be ajar.
25. Vehicle Security Light
If during starting, the key code is not correctly
recognized, the Vehicle Security Light comes
on in the instrument panel. In this case, turn
the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is
still locked, try again with the other keys that come with
the vehicle. Contact a Fiat studio if you still cannot start
the engine.
If with the engine running the warning light flashes, this
means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor
device. Contact Fiat studio to have all the keys
programmed.
26. Temperature Gauge
The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates
that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If all the segments of the
temperature gauge are lit, pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If you hear continuous chimes, turn
the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized studio
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling
System Pressure Cap” paragraph.
27. Odometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) Display Area
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument
cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and
“Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC
display. For additional information, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).”
Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” for further information.
28. Fuel Gauge / Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door
is located on the right side of the vehicle. When the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the digital
scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
NOTE: The fuel gauge and range will not immediately
update accurately when refueling with the engine on.
29. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
30. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Displays
1 — Temperature Indicator 6 — Message Display
2 — Fuel Level Gauge 7 — Coolant Temperature
Gauge
3 — Clock 8 — Digital Speedometer
4 — Odometer 9 — Ice Warning Indicator
5 — Sport Mode 10 — Gear Shift Indicator (GSI)
1 — Ice Warning Indicator 6 — Message Display
2 — Temperature Indicator 7 — Coolant Temperature
Gauge
3 — Fuel Level Gauge 8 — Digital Speedometer
4 — Clock 9 — Autostick® Gear Indicator
5 — Odometer 10 — Auto/Sport/ECO Indica-
tor
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
EVIC Control Buttons
Press the SET ESC button briefly to access the menu
and/or go to next screen or to confirm the required menu
option. Press and hold the SET ESC button (approxi-
mately one second) to return to the main screen.
Press the UP
button to scroll upward through the
displayed menu and the related options or to increase
the displayed value.
Press the DOWN
button to scroll downward
through the displayed menu and the related options
or to decrease the value displayed.
NOTE: UP
and DOWN buttons activate differ-
ent functions according to the following situations:
• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
• To increase or decrease values during settings.
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC
display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers
covered (for versions/markets, where provided) for a
few seconds.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Press the UP
and DOWN buttons to access
the different options and settings (setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pressing the SET
ESC button. Single presses on the UP
or DOWN
buttons will scroll through the setup menu options.
The menu includes the following functions:
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Date
• See Radio
• Speed Display
• Autoclose
• Units
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Button Volume
• Daylights (D.R.L.)
• Hill Start
• Tire Pressure
• Unlock Driver Door First
• Unlock All Doors
• Exit Menu
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button to select the main
menu option to set.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button (by single
presses) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to store the new
setting and go back to the main menu option previ-
ously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub-
menu
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button to display the first
submenu option.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button (by single
presses) to scroll through all the submenu options.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to select the dis-
played submenu option and to open the relevant setup
menu.
4. Press the UP
or DOWN button (by single
presses) to select the new setting for this submenu
option.
5. Briefly press the SET ESC button to store the new
setting and go back to the previously selected sub-
menu option.
6. Press and hold the SET ESC button to return to the
main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer
hold).
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the SET ESC button. To reset the oil change
indicator system (after performing the scheduled main-
tenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.(Do not
start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays informa-
tion such as; trip information, range, fuel consumption,
average speed and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
• A short button press displays the different values.
• A long button press resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
• Press and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 99.59 (99
hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset automati-
cally.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, press and hold the TRIP button for
over one second to reset.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the SET ESC button for longer
than one second.
Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu
screen or press and hold the SET ESC (approximately
one second) to go back to the main screen without storing
settings.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new
trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance A
• Average consumption
• Instant consumption A
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time).
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance B
• Average consumption B
• Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time).
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” can-
not be reset.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.).
Trip planning must take into account the above notes.
Distance Travelled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Consumption
This value shows the approximate average consumption
since the last reset.
Instant Consumption
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the car is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func-
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Dimmer
The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable
of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust-
ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly.
NOTE: The brightness of the instrument panel may
change while travelling following an event that causes
switching from “day” to “night” conditions (or vice
versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on
avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.).
To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows:
1. Press the UP
or DOWN button to set the
required brightness level.
2. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing settings.
Speed Beep (Speed Limit)
With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit
(mph or km/h); when this limit is exceeded the driver is
immediately alerted.
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button. The display will
show the message (Speed Beep).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button to select speed
limit activation (On) or deactivation (Off).
3. When the function is activated (On), briefly press the
SET ESC button to display the presently set activation
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
speed. Pressing the UP
or DOWN buttons
selects the speed limit. Press SET ESC to confirm
selection.
NOTE: Selection is possible between 20 and 125 mph
or km/h, depending on the selected unit. The setting will
increase/decrease by five units each time the UP/DOWN
button is pressed. Press and hold the UP/DOWN button
to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting
by briefly pressing the button when you approach the
required setting.
• Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button. “On” will flash on
the display.
2. Press the DOWN
button. “Off” will flash on the
display.
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
Trip B Data (Trip B On)
Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.
For further information see “Trip Computer.”
For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button. “On” or “Off” will
flash on the display (according to previous setting).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button to select the
setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
Set Time (Clock)
This function may be used to set the clock through two
sub-menu items: “Time” and “Mode.”
Proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button. The display will
show the two sub-menu items “Time” and “Mode.”
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button to navigate the
two sub-menu items.
3. Select the required option and then press the SET ESC
button.
4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly
press the SET ESC button and “hours” will flash on
the display.
5. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
6. Briefly press the SET ESC button and “minutes” will
flash on the display.
7. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
NOTE:
• The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each
time the UP
or DOWN button is pressed.
Press and hold the button to increase/decrease the
setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pressing
the button when you approach the required set-
ting.
• Briefly press the SET ESC button to return to the
“Time” sub-function.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly press
the SET ESC button. The previously set display
format will flash on the display.
• Press the UP
or DOWN button to select
“24h” or “12h.”
When you have selected the required settings, briefly
press the SET ESC button to go back to the Time, Mode
sub-menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
Set Date
This function may be used to set the date (day - month -
year).
To change the date proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button and “year” will flash
on the display.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button and “month” will
flash on the display.
4. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
5. Briefly press the SET ESC button and “day” will flash
on the display.
6. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit
each time the UP
or DOWN button is pressed.
Press and hold the UP
or DOWN button to
increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting
by briefly pressing the button when you approach the
required setting.
• Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
See Radio (Repeat Audio Information)
With this function active, the EVIC display shows infor-
mation relevant to the sound system.
• Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning
activation or AutoSTore.
• CD audio, CD MP3: track number.
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system
info displaying proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button “On” or “Off” will
flash on the display (according to the previous set-
ting).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate
“BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information.
Speed Display
When this function is activated the cluster will display
the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h).
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display
feature, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button. “MPH”, “km/h”,
then “Off” will flash on the display (according to
previous setting).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button to select dis-
play deactivation “Off”, “MPH” or “km/h”.
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Autoclose
With this function active, the doors will automatically
lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
To change the setting proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button “On” or “Off” will
flash on the display (according to the previous set-
ting).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
Units (Set Units)
This function may be used to set the measurement unit in
three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel
Economy.”
To set the required unit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button to display the three
sub-menus.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button to navigate the
three sub-menus.
3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly press
the SET ESC button.
4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu: briefly press
the SET ESC button. Either “mi” or “km” will appear
on the display (according to the previous setting).
5. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
6. Briefly press the SET ESC button to return to the
sub-menu.
7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly
press the SET ESC button. Either “mpg,” “km/l ” or
“l/100km” will appear on the display (according to
the previous setting).
If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will
be displayed in “mpg.”
If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will
be displayed in either km/l or l/100km.
1. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
2. Briefly press the SET ESC button to return to the
sub-menu.
3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly
press the SET ESC button. Either “°F” or “°C” will
appear on the display (according to the previous
setting).
4. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
5. Briefly press the SET ESC button to return to the
sub-menu.
When you have made the required settings, briefly press
the SET ESC button to go back to the sub-menu screen,
or press and hold the SET ESC button (approximately
one second) to go back to the main screen without storing
the settings.
Language (Selecting The Language)
The messages can be displayed in the following lan-
guages: Italian, English, German, Portuguese, Spanish,
French, Dutch, Polish.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the required language, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button. The previously set
“language” will flash on the display.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning
Buzzer Volume)
With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany-
ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to
one of eight volume levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button. The previously set
volume “level” will flash on the display.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
Button Volume (Button Volume Adjustment)
This function may be used to adjust the volume of the
beep accompanying the buttons. SET ESC,UP
or
DOWN
buttons can be adjusted according to 8
levels.
To adjust the volume, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button. The previously set
volume “level” will flash on the display.
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the SET ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For S.B.R.
Indication)
This function will only be displayed after a FCA US LLC
studio has deactivated the S.B.R. system.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This function may be used to activate / deactivate the
Daytime Running Lamps.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button to display the three
sub-menus.
2. Briefly press the SET ESC button. “On” or “Off” will
flash on the display (according to previous setting).
3. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
4. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
GSI (Gear Shift Indicator)
This function may be used to set the Gear Shift Indicator
in two submenus: “Fuel Econ On” and “Fuel Econ Off.”
• Fuel Econ On – turns on a fuel economy upshift light
in the instrument cluster, for optimum fuel economy,
when operating in base driving mode.
• Fuel Econ Off – the fuel economy upshift light is
disabled.
To set the required unit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button to display the two
sub-menus.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button to navigate the
two sub-menus.
3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly press
the SET ESC button.
4. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
5. Briefly press the SET ESC button to return to the
sub-menu.
When you have made the required settings, briefly press
the SET ESC button to go back to the sub-menu screen,
or press and hold the SET ESC button (approximately
one second) to go back to the main screen without storing
the settings.
Hill Start Assist
This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop
on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of
brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of
time after the foot has been removed from the brake
pedal.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1. Briefly press the SET ESC button. “On” or “Off” will
flash on the display (according to previous setting).
2. Press the UP
or DOWN button for setting.
3. Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
Lock
When Unlock Driver Door is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Drivers Door is selected, you must press the RKE trans-
mitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger
door. When All Doors is selected, both of the doors will
unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “Unlock Driver Door” or “All
Doors” appears.
Exit Menu
This function closes the initial menu screen.
Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the main
screen.
Press the
button to return to the first menu option
(Speed Beep).
Press the
button to return to the last menu option
(Daylights).
SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO
Introduction
The radio has been designed according to the specifica-
tions of the passenger compartment, with a personalized
design to match the style of the dashboard.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate
“BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information.
The instructions for use are given below and we recom-
mend you to read them carefully.
Suggestions
Road Safety
Please, learn how to use all different radio functions (e.g.
store stations) before beginning to drive.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly while driving.
Reception may be interfered with by the presence of
mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far
away from the broadcaster.
WARNING!
Having the volume turned up high can cause the
driver to not be able to hear important traffic sounds,
i.e. sirens, horns, etc. This could cause an accident.
Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear
background noises.
Care And Maintenance
Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only. Cleaning
and polishing products could damage the surface.
CDs
The presence of dirt, scratches or distortions on the CDs
could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is
playing. For optimal playback conditions, follow these
guidelines:
• Only use branded CDs.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
• Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger
marks or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the
outside and clean them from the middle outwards.
• Never use chemicals (e.g. antistatics or thinners or
sprays) for cleaning as they could damage the surface
of the CDs.
• After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes to
prevent them from being damaged.
• Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high tempera-
tures or moisture for long periods.
• Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the
recorded surface with pencils or pens.
• Do not use CDs that are very scratched, flawed,
distorted, etc. Using discs like these will result in
malfunctions or damage to the player.
• The use of original CD media is required for the best
quality audio production. Correct operation is not
guaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were
not correctly burned and/or with a maximum capacity
above 650 Mb.
• Do not use commercially available protective sheets
for CDs or discs, with stabilizers, etc. as they could get
stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc.
• If a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few
seconds before the system starts to play it. The CD
player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected
discs. The fact that the CD is protected from being
copied is often shown in very small letters or is
difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may
be, for example, “COPY CONTROL”, “COPY PRO-
TECTED”, “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A
PC/MAC”.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The CD player is capable of reading most compression
systems currently in use, following the development of
these systems, the reading of all compression formats
is not guaranteed.
Technical Specifications
The complete system consists of:
• Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers, one
speaker in each of the front doors.
• Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers, one speaker in
each of the front pillars.
• Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers, one speaker
in each of the rear side panels.
• Antenna on the car roof.
• Radio with CD/MP3 player.
With Alpine Premium Audio system (if equipped):
• Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers.
• Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars.
• Two 100 mm full range speakers, one speaker in each
of the rear side panels.
• An amplifier in the trunk on the right-hand side panel.
• Antenna on the car roof.
• Radio with CD/MP3 player.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Quick Guide
Radio Controls
BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE
On Short button press
Off Short button press
TUNER AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) source
selection
Short repeated button press
A-B-C Cycles A, B, C presets for AM, FM,
SAT (if equipped)
Short repeated button press
MEDIA
CD/AUX/Media Player (if equipped
and present) source selection
Short repeated button press
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE
(Mute/Pause Button)
Volume activation/deactivation
(Mute/Pause)
Short button press
AUDIO Audio adjustments: low tones
(BASS), high tones (TREBLE), left/
right balance (BALANCE), front/
rear balance (FADER)
Menu activation: short button press
Adjustment type selection: press
or
Adjustment of values: press
or
(Information Button)
Song, Artist, Album, Genre, Playlist,
Folder information (if available) in
CD, Media Player and Satellite (if so
equipped); Toggles RBDS informa-
tion in FM
MENU Advanced functions adjustment Menu activation: short button press
Adjustment type selection: press
or
Adjustment of values: press
or
+Vol/–Vol Volume adjustment Press + button: volume increase
Press – button: volume decrease
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
BUTTON RADIO FUNCTIONS MODE
Radio Station Search:
• Automatic Search
• Manual Search
Automatic search: press buttons
or (long press for fast for-
ward)
Manual search: press buttons
or
(long press for fast forward)
12345 Current radio station storing Long button press for memory pre-
set 1 to 5 respectively
Stored station recall Short button press for memory pre-
set 1 to 5 respectively
BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS MODE
CD ejection Short button press
Previous/next track play Short button press
or
CD track fast forward/rewind Long button press
or
Previous/next folder play (for CD-
MP3)
Short button press
or
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
The radio offers the following functions:
Radio Section
• PLL tuning with FM/AM bands
• RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
• Automatic/manual station tuning
• FM Multipath detector
• Manual storing of 25 stations (base radio) and 40
stations (if equipped with Satellite): 15 on FM band (5
on FMA, 5 on FMB, 5 on FMC), 10 on AM band (5 on
AMA, 5 on AMB), 15 on Satellite Band - if equipped (5
on SATA, 5 on SATB, 5 on SATC)
• SPEED VOLUME function: Customer selectable auto-
matic volume adjustment depending on the car speed
• Automatic Stereo/Mono selection
CD Section
• Track selection (forward/backward)
• Fast forward/rewind through tracks
• CD Display function: display of track number and on
mp3 discs (song title, artist) and time elapsed since
start of the track
• Playing Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW
WARNING!
On multimedia CDs, besides audio tracks, there are
data tracks too. Playing this type of CD could cause
hissing at a volume that could jeopardize road safety
as well as causing damage to the final stages and the
speakers.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
CD/MP3 Section
• MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG)
• Folder selection (previous/next)
• Track selection (forward/backward)
• Fast forward/rewind through tracks
• MP3 Display function: display of folder name, ID3-
TAG information, time elapsed since the start of the
track, name of the file
• Playing audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW
Audio Section
• Mute/pause function
• Soft mute function
• Loudness function
• Graphic 7 band equalizer (if equipped)
• Separate bass/treble tone adjustment
• Right/left channel balancing
• Front/rear fader
Functions And Adjustments
Turning The Car Radio On
The car radio comes on when the
(ON/OFF) button
is pressed briefly.
When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit
is on, the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it
had been set higher when previously used.
Turning The Car Radio Off
Press the
(ON/OFF) button to turn the radio off.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting The Radio Functions
By pressing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly,
the following audio sources can be selected cyclically:
• AM, FM and Satellite Bands (if equipped)
Selecting The CD Function
By briefly pressing the MEDIA button, the CD audio
source can be selected (only if a CD is loaded).
Volume Adjustment
To adjust the volume, press the buttons +Vol or –Vol to
increase/decrease the volume.
Mute/Pause Function
Press the
button briefly to activate the MUTE func-
tion. The volume will gradually decrease and the
wording “TUNER Mute” will be shown on the display
(in radio mode) or “CD Pause” (in CD mode).
Press the
button again to deactivate the MUTE
function. The volume will gradually increase until it
reaches the previously set level.
When the volume level is changed using the dedicated
controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the vol-
ume is adjusted to the new level selected.
Audio Adjustment
The functions that can be selected from the audio menu
change depending on the context: AM/FM/MEDIA/
SATELLITE.
Press the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio
functions. After the AUDIO button is first pressed, the
display will show the Bass level value for the source
activated at that time (e.g. in FM mode the display will
show the wording “FM Bass +2”).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Use the buttons
or to scroll through the Menu
functions. To change the setting of the selected func-
tion, use the
or buttons.
The current status of the selected function appears on the
display.
The functions managed by the Audio Menu are:
• BASS (Bass adjustment)
• TREBLE (Treble adjustment)
• BALANCE (right/left Balance adjustment)
• FADER (front/rear Balance adjustment)
• LOUDNESS (Loudness function activation/
deactivation)
• EQUALIZER — if equipped (activation and selection
of factory equalization adjustments)
• USER EQUALIZER — if equipped (customized equal-
ization adjustment)
Tone Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
1. Press AUDIO button.
2. Press the
or button to select “Bass” or
“Treble” in the AUDIO menu.
3. Press the
or button or to increase/decrease
the bass or treble adjustments.
By pressing the
or buttons briefly, the levels will
change progressively. By pressing them down longer,
the levels will change quickly.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Balance Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
1. Press AUDIO button.
2. Press the
or button to set “Balance” in the
AUDIO menu.
3. Press the
button to increase the sound from the
left speakers or the
button to increase the sound
from the right speakers.
By pressing the
or buttons briefly, the levels will
change progressively. By pressing them down longer,
the levels will change quickly.
Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs
at the same level.
Fader Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
1. Press AUDIO button.
2. Press the
or button to set “Fader” in the
AUDIO menu.
3. Press the
button to increase the sound coming
from the rear speakers or the
button to increase
the sound coming from the front speakers.
By pressing the
or buttons briefly, the levels will
change progressively. By pressing them down longer,
the levels will change quickly.
Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs
at the same level.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Loudness Function — If Equipped
The Loudness function improves the volume of the
sound while listening at low volumes, increasing the bass
and treble.
To activate/deactivate this function, select the “Loud-
ness” setting in the AUDIO menu. The condition of the
function (on or off) is shown on the display for a few
seconds by the wording “Loudness On” or “Loudness
Off”.
Preset/User/Classic/Rock/Jazz Functions — If
Equipped
The built-in equalizer can be activated/deactivated.
When the equalizer function is off, the audio settings can
only be changed by adjusting the “Bass” and “Treble”
settings, whereas when the function is on, the acoustic
curves can be adjusted. To deactivate the equalizer, select
the “EQ Preset” function in the audio menu.
To activate the equalizer, use the AUDIO button or to
select one of the adjustments:
• “EQ User” (adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can
be changed by the user)
• “Classic” (equalizer preset for optimal classic music
sound)
• “Rock” (equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop
music sound)
• “Jazz” (equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound)
When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the
wording “EQ” lights up.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
User EQ Settings Function — If Equipped
To set a personalized equalizer adjustment:
1. Press AUDIO button.
2. Use the
or buttons to set EQ function.
3. Use
or buttons to select ⬙EQ User.⬙
4. Press MENU button to start adjusting equalizer.
5. On the display a seven bar graph will appear, in which
each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to be
adjusted by using the
or buttons. The selected
bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using
or buttons.
6. To store the setting, press the MENU or AUDIO
buttons.
Menu
MENU Button Functions
Press the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu
function.
Use the
or buttons to scroll through the menu
functions. To change the setting of the selected func-
tion, use the
or buttons.
The current status of the selected function appears on the
display.
The functions managed by the Menu are:
• Speech Volume
• Aux Audio Offset
• Radio Off
• Sat ID
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
• SiriusXM Telephone Number
• System Reset
• Speed Volume
• On Volume Limit
Press the MENU button again to exit the Menu function.
Speed Volume Function — If Equipped
This function automatically adapts the volume level to
the speed of the car, turning up the volume when the
speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level
inside the passenger compartment. To activate/
deactivate the function, use the buttons. The wording
“Speed volume” appears on the display, followed by the
current status of the function:
• Off: function deactivated
• Low: function activated (low sensitivity)
• High: function activated (high sensitivity)
On Volume Limit
This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the
maximum volume limit when turning the radio on.
The display shows the function status:
• “On volume limit: on” – when the radio is turned on
the volume level will be:
– If the volume level is equal to or higher than the
maximum value, the radio will come on at the
maximum volume.
– If the volume level is between the minimum and
maximum values, the radio will come on at the
same volume as before it was switched off.
– If the volume level is equal to or lower than the
minimum value, the radio will come on at the
minimum volume.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• “On volume limit: off” – The radio will come on at the
same volume as before it was switched off. The
volume level can be between 0 and 40.
Use the buttons
or to change the setting.
NOTE:
• Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the
activation/deactivation of the function and not the
minimum or maximum volume value.
• If the battery charge is too low, the volume cannot be
adjusted between the minimum and the maximum
level.
Radio Off Function
This function makes it possible to set the radio switching
off mode by choosing between two methods.
The chosen mode appears on the display:
• “Radio off: 00 min” — The radio turns off in connec-
tion with the ignition key; the radio is turned auto-
matically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP
position.
• “Radio off: 20 min” — The radio turns off indepen-
dently from the ignition key; the radio remains on for
a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has
been turned to the STOP position.
System Reset Function
This function is used to restore all settings to the factory
values. The options are:
• NO — No restore intervention.
• YES —
The default parameters will be restored. During
such operation, the wording “Resetting” appears on the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
display. At the end of the operation, the source does not
change and the previous situation will be displayed.
Radio
(Tuner) Introduction
When the car radio is turned on, the last function that
was selected before turning it off (Radio, CD, CD MP3,
AUX) is activated.
To select the Radio function when another audio source is
being listened to, briefly press the TUNER button.
Once the Radio mode has been activated, the display will
show the name (RBDS stations only) or the frequency of
the selected radio station, the frequency band selected
(e.g. FMA) and the preset button number (e.g. P1).
Frequency Band Selection
With the Radio mode active, press the FM or AM tuner
button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired recep-
tion band.
Each time the button is pressed the following bands are
selected cyclically:
• AM, FM or SAT (if equipped)
Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings
on the display. The radio will be tuned to last station
selected on the respective frequency band.
Preset Buttons
The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the
following pre-selections:
• 15 in the FM band (5 in FMA, 5 in FMB, 5 in FMC
• 10 in the AM band (5 in AMA, 5 in AMB)
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• 15 in SAT (if so equipped) (5 SATA, 5 SATB, 5 SATC)
To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency
band and then briefly press the corresponding preset
button (from 1 to 5).
By pressing the preset button for more than 2 seconds,
the tuned station will be stored. Pressing the A-B-C
button will change between the preset memory group in
the current frequency band.
Automatic Tuning
Briefly press the
or button to start the automatic
tuning search for the next station that can be received
in the selected direction.
If the
or button is pressed for longer, the rapid
search is started. When the button is released, the
tuner will stop on the next station that can be received.
Manual Tuning
This is used to manually search for stations in the
preselected band.
Select the desired frequency band and then press briefly
and repeatedly the
or button to start the search in
the desired direction. If the
or button is pressed
longer, the fast search starts and then stops when the
button is released.
Stereophonic Broadcasters
If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is
automatically switched from Stereo to Mono.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped
Satellite Radio Antenna — If Equipped
The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof
of the vehicle. Do not place items on the roof around the
roof top antenna location. Objects placed within the line
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance.
Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the
antenna as possible. Do not place items directly on or
above the antenna.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
With over 130 channels, SiriusXM Satellite Radio brings
you more of what you love. Get 69 channels of 100%
commercial-free music, plus all of your favorite sports,
news, talk and entertainment. Hear every NFL game,
every NASCAR race, college sports and more. The big-
gest and most compelling names in talk with Howard
Stern and Martha Stewart, laugh-out-loud comedy with
Jamie Foxx’s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy, plus
kids’ programming, world-class news, local traffic and
weather. All of this with crystal clear, coast-to-coast
coverage. Everything worth listening to is now on
SiriusXM. A one-year SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscrip-
tion is included. SiriusXM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription,
sold separately after trial subscription included with
vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided
by SiriusXM and are subject to change. Subscriptions
governed by Terms & Conditions available at
sirius.com/service terms. SiriusXM Radio U.S. service
only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48
contiguous United States, D.C., and PR. Service available
in Canada; see www.siriuscanada.ca.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Types
Program Types can be selected by pressing the
or
buttons. The Program Type will change to the next
category and the radio will then tune to first station in
that program type. Pressing
or buttons will tune
to only the stations in that program type.
Pressing the
or buttons until ⬙All⬙ is displayed
will allow normal tuning to all stations.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Program Types available are: All, Pop, Rock,
Electronic/Dance, Hip-Hop/R&B, Country, Christian,
Jazz/Standards, Classical, Latin/World, Sports, Enter-
tainment, Talk, News, NPR, Comedy, Family & Health,
Religion, Traffic/Weather.
You can find the SiriusXM current terms and conditions
at http://www.sirius.com.
Re-Subscribe To SiriusXM Satellite Radio
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with their radio. Following expiration of the free services,
it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
Press the UP/DOWN button to scroll through the Menu
Functions, and the Left/Right button to change the
selected Set-up Menu function.
Write down the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) for your
receiver. To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of
SiriusXM Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0.
Make sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are
correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered
correctly, then the SiriusXM subscription will not be able
to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active
when installed in the customer’s vehicle. To reactivate
your service, either call the number listed on the display
or visit the provider online.
CAUTION!
Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any
errors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its
use in vehicles.
SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks
of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM
Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and
programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject
to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Condi-
tions available at sirius.com/service terms. SiriusXM
Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years
of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., & PR.
Visit www.sirius.com
Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A
Sirius Radio
When a radio needs to be replaced, the studio will need
the SIRIUS information to order a new radio (even if the
SIRIUS subscription has lapsed). The ESN number con-
tains 12 digits.
The following are instructions for retrieving the Electronic
Serial Number (ESN) from FIAT 500 NAFTA model radios:
To retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module
tune to Channel 0. Make sure that when the order is
placed, the ESN are correct. If any of the ESN numbers
are not entered correctly, then the SIRIUS subscription
will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and
will not be active when installed in the customer’s
vehicle.
CD Player
Introduction
This chapter describes the operation of the CD player
only. To operate the radio, refer to the description in the
“Functions and Adjustments” chapter.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player Selection
To activate the CD player built into the equipment,
proceed as follows:
• Load a CD with the equipment switched on. The first
track will start to play.
or
• If a CD has already been loaded, turn on the radio and
then briefly press the MEDIA button to select the “CD”
function mode. The last track listened to will start to
play.
It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal
playing. If CD-R/RWs are used, we recommend using
good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed
possible.
CD Loading/Ejecting
To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the
motorized loading system, which will position it cor-
rectly.
The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition
key turned to ON/RUN. In this case, the radio will
remain off. When the radio is turned on, the last source
listened to before being switched off, will be activated.
When a CD is inserted, the display will show the symbol
“CD” and the wording “CD Reading.” They will remain
displayed for the whole time required for the radio to
read the CD. When this time has elapsed the radio
automatically starts playing the first track.
Press the
button with the radio turned on, to
activate the motorized CD ejection system. After ejec-
tion, the last audio source listened to before playing
the CD will be heard.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
If the CD is not removed from the radio, it will automati-
cally be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not
resume playing until the ⬙MEDIA⬙ button is pressed to
select the CD mode. The radio will switch to the last
source prior to CD mode.
The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off.
Possible Error Messages
If the loaded CD cannot be read (e.g. a CD ROM has been
inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is
a reading error) the display shows the wording “CD Disc
error.”
The CD will then be ejected and the audio source
activated before the CD mode selection will be heard.
A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these
functions are over. At the end, with the CD mode
activated, the display will show the wording “CD Disc
error” for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected.
Display Information
When the CD player is operating, information will ap-
pear on the display with the following meaning:
• “Track 5” indicates the CD track number.
• “03:42” indicates the time elapsed since the start of the
track (if the relevant Menu function is activated).
Track Selection
Briefly press the
button to play the previous CD
track and the button to play the next track. The
tracks are selected cyclically: the first track is selected
after the last track and vice versa.
If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds,
pressing the
button, starts the track again from the
beginning. In this case, if you want to play the
previous track, press the
button twice consecu-
tively.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Track Fast Forward/Rewind
Keep the
button pressed down to fast forward the
selected track and keep the
button pressed down to
fast rewind the track. The fast forward/rewind will
stop once the button is released.
Pause Function
To pause the CD player, press the
button. The word-
ing “CD Pause” appears on the display.
To resume listening to the track, press the
button
again.
CD MP3 Player
Introduction
This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3
player.
NOTE: Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed
from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.
MP3 Mode
In addition to playing regular audio CDs, the radio is also
enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio
files have been recorded in an MP3 format.
To guarantee optimal reproduction, it is advisable to use
good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible.
The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that
create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks
(folders or subfolders are all on the same level). The
folders that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected.
The specifications and operating conditions for playing
MP3 files are the following:
• The CD-ROMs used should be burned in accordance
with ISO standard 9660.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
• The music files should have the extension “.mp3” or
“.wma” files with a different extension will not be
reproduced.
• The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are:
44.1 kHz, stereo (from 96 to 320 kbit/s) – 22.05 kHz,
mono or stereo (from 32 to 80 kbit/s).
• Tracks with a variable bit-rate can be reproduced.
NOTE: The track names must not include the following
characters: spaces, ‘ (apostrophes), ( and ) (open and close
brackets). During the burning of a MP3 CD, make sure
that the names of the files do not contain these characters;
if not, the radio will not be able to play the tracks
involved.
Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs
If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced,
CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files, the radio automati-
cally starts playing the audio session. It is possible to
move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the
CD button pressed for more than two seconds.
NOTE: When the function is activated the radio may take
a few seconds to start playing. While checking the disc
the display will show “CD Reading.” If no MP3 files are
detected, the radio will resume playing the audio session
from the point where it was interrupted.
Display Information
ID3–Tag Information Display
In addition to the information relating to the time
elapsed, folder name and file name, the radio is also
capable of displaying ID3–TAG information relating to
Title Track, Artist and Author.
When one of the ID3-TAG pieces of information is chosen
to be displayed (Title, Artist, Album) and this informa-
tion has not been recorded for the track played, the text
⬙UNKNOWN⬙ will be displayed for that field.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selection Of Next/Previous Folder
Press the
button to select a next folder or the
button to select the previous folder. The display
will show the number of the folder.
The folders are selected cyclically. The first folder is
selected after the last folder and vice versa.
If no other folder/track is selected in the next 2 seconds,
the first track on the new folder will be played.
At that moment selected the last track in the folder is
playing, the next folder will be played.
Structure Of The Folders
The radio with MP3 player:
• Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain
MP3 format files
• If the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in
sub-folders their structure is compressed to a single
level structure, where the sub-folders are taken to the
level of the main folders.
Troubleshooting
General
Sound Volume Low
The Fader function should be adjusted to the values “F”
(front) only to prevent the reduction in radio output
power and the cancelling of the volume if the Fader level
adjustment is equal to R+9.
Source Can Not Be Selected
Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD to
be listened to.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
CD Player
The CD Does Not Play
The CD is dirty. Clean the CD.
The CD is scratched. Try using another CD.
The CD Can Not Be Loaded
A CD is already loaded. Press the
button and remove
the CD.
MP3 File Reading
Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files
The CD is scratched or dirty.
The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly
Displayed.
In some cases (due to the recording mode) the duration of
the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual”
for further information.
Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) — If
Equipped
A Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) is avail-
able as optional equipment for this vehicle, refer to the
Navigation User Guide for further information.
iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart-
ment.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ radio User’s Manual
for iPod® or external USB device support capability.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
1 — iPod® Or External USB Device Holder
2 — Cable Jack
3 — USB Connector
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to
select/enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player Operation
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ User’s Manual for
further information.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary
dials and one inner push knob.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to
the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
2. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
3. Recirculation Control
Rotate this control to change the system between recir-
culation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-
lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection.
4. Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be ad-
justed to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor
outlets.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
ture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and
side window demister outlets. Use this mode
with maximum blower and temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
5. A/C Button
Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation
modes at the same time.
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the
driver to select individual comfort settings.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for op-
timum comfort and convenience.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button
Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recir-
culation automatically. Press and release to select. Per-
forming this function will cause the ATC to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to
“Automatic Operation” for more information.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
3. Temperature Control Up Button
Provides temperature up control. Push the button for
warmer temperature settings.
4. Blower Control Up Button
There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed increases
as you press this button. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
5. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side win-
dow demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or
snowy conditions that require extra heat to the wind-
shield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while
reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing this
function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
6. Front Defrost
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON. The blower will auto-
matically default to medium-high if the Defrost mode is
selected. Performing this function will cause the ATC to
switch into manual mode.
7. Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small
amount flowing through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
8. Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
9. Blower Control Down Button
There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed decreases
as you press this button. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
10. Temperature Control Down Button
Provides temperature down control. Push the button for
cooler temperature settings.
11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button
Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF.
12. Recirculation Control Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE:
• When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will
flash if pressed. This indicates that you can not
proceed to this mode due to fogging risk.
• When the Auto indicator is on and the Recirculation
indicator is off, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If
the Recirculation indicator is on, the Recirculation
setting is manual and Recirculation is on.
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate
when on.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the temperature con-
trol buttons. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features”
in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into AUTO mode.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
Blower Control
There are 12 fixed blower speeds. Use
the blower control up or down buttons
to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you
select. The blower speed increases as
you press or hold the blower control
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
up button and decreases when you press or hold the
blower control down button.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
pressing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan
will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds
are selected. This allows the front occupants to control
the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
AUTO mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor
mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators
illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch into manual mode.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demister outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
while keeping the windshield clear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demister outlets. Use Defrost mode with maxi-
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected,
the blower will automatically default to medium-high.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active
to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the
vehicle.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
Defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Summer Operation
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature opera-
tion, the air conditioning system performance may be
reduced. This is to help protect the engine from overheat-
ing during the high load condition.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recir-
culation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while
in automatic mode.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the air conditioning system
is started again.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................219
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped ........219
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ......219
▫ Normal Starting.......................219
▫ Cold Weather Operation ................220
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................220
▫ After Starting ........................221
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .221
▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission...........221
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ..............223
▫ Downshifting ........................223
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................224
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............226
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .226
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission .........226
▫ Gear Ranges .........................227
䡵 AUTOSTICK® — IF EQUIPPED ............232
▫ Operation ...........................232
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........234
5
▫ Acceleration .........................234
▫ Traction ............................235
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............235
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................235
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................236
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................237
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................238
䡵 SPORT MODE .........................240
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped ........240
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ......241
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................242
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .242
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .244
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............244
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............244
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............245
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................245
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........247
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ................250
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............251
▫ Tire Markings ........................251
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........255
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........257
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........258
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........262
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Pressure ........................262
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................263
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .264
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................265
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped ............266
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .266
▫ Snow Tires ..........................266
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped ...................267
▫ Compact Spare Tire ....................267
▫ Tire Spinning ........................268
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................268
▫ Life Of Tire .........................269
▫ Replacement Tires .....................270
䡵 TIRE CHAINS .........................271
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....273
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ..............................274
▫ Base System .........................276
▫ Enhanced System– If Equipped ............279
▫ General Information ...................279
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................279
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS – 1.4L Turbo ........280
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................280
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends..............281
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......281
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................282
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................282
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................283
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............284
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................284
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............284
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............286
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................286
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................287
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .287
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock-
ing ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position and
release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. An externally-
powered electric engine block heater is available as
optional equipment or from your authorized studio.
The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is
below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended SAE 5W-30 oil and adher-
ing to the prescribed oil change intervals is important
to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory
starting in cold conditions.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE: To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, lift the
ring under the knob and, at the same time move the
gearshift lever to the right and then backward.
Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third gear.
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must
be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear. When
selecting REVERSE gear, the driver should pause (ap-
proximately 2 seconds) after pushing in the clutch pedal
and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to
stop spinning. Should an unwanted clash noise be pro-
duced, the pause length should be increased.
Shift Lever
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Clashing REVERSE gear, especially if vehicle is mov-
ing, can result in transmission damage.
• During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant
is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the trans-
mission.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following
table.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units In mph (km/h)
Engine
Size
Accel-
era-
tion
Rate
1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5
1.4L/
1.4L
Turbo
Engine
Accel 14
(23)
23
(37)
29
(47)
38
(61)
Cruise 12
(19)
18
(29)
25
(40)
32
(52)
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first gear when descending a steep
grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), or in a location
accessible to children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF
position. The key can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition is in the OFF position, and once
removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift lever out
of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
(Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
(refer to “AutoStick®” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information). Moving the shift lever forward or
rearward (–/+) while in the AutoStick® position (beside
the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmis-
sion gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK, secur-
ing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi-
tion to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick® shift control (described be-
low) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using
a lower gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds nor-
mal operating limits, the transmission controller will
expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine coolant temperature.
Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera-
ture has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illu-
minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized studio for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized studio at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized studio has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized studio
service is required.
AUTOSTICK® — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en-
gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-
shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (beside
the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rear-
ward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in
snow or icy conditions. To select second or third gear
after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift lever
rearward (+) once or twice.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The system will ignore shift commands that would
cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep
will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is en-
gaged because the transmission will not shift auto-
matically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to a automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• If the system detects a problem, it will disable
AutoStick® mode and the transmission will return to
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
• To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever
to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick® position at any time without taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced or no power steer-
ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon as pos-
sible.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to an authorized studio for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER-
ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
EVIC screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneu-
vers may have occurred which caused an over tempera-
ture condition in the power steering system. Once driv-
ing conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle
for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed
the EVIC screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to be
taken to an authorized studio for service. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized studio for
service.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manual
transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmis-
sion in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized studio immediately.
SPORT MODE
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver
with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal-to-engine
response. This driving mode is useful while driving on
twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in
spirited cornering.
1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver
with slight increase in effort and changes the transmis-
sion shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This
driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads
where more steering precision is desired in spirited
cornering.
1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button.
SPORT Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard
driving mode.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example; repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake
Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake
use.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
SPORT Button
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Con-
trol System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC)” in this section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or 7%
grade or greater (automatic transmission) hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill
is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi-
tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering
column (Manual Transmission Only).
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission)
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific
reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC
Off switch. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle
is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more
wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to
gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the switch
again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off
mode by pressing the switch. Once the situation requir-
ing ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the
switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
WARNING! (Continued)
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized studio as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel-
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
B-Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire and Loading Information Placard
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-
tion.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment
vehicle studio for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat,
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable) and
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
• Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h).
• Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica-
tors, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced.
• Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to replacement tires in this section for further informa-
tion.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Use Security Chain Company (SCC) SCC Z6 low
profile or equivalent chains on 185/55R15 tires only.
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
chain before further use.
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about 0.5
mile (0.8 km).
• Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry
pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested
operating speed of the chain manufacturer, if dif-
ferent from the speed recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the
chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest
different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all
chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial)
chains.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F (20°
C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire
xxx.x psi” text message will display when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable” text message
will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid.
4. This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enhanced System– If Equipped
When the vehicle is equipped with an enhanced TPM
system, the driver can view text messages showing the
actual tire pressure value by position by selecting the tire
pressure menu command in the instrument cluster. Refer
to the instrument panel features section of the owners
manual.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States MRXC4W4MA4
Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4
(Single)
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 91. The manufac-
turer recommends the use of 91 octane or higher for
optimum performance.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – 1.4L Turbo
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. For
optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91
octane or higher is recommended.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% Ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized studio)
• change the engine oil and oil filter
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized studio for service
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may
cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire.
(Continued)
Fuel Filler Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
WARNING! (Continued)
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE Transmission in NEU-
TRAL
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmis-
sion is in NEUTRAL.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........291
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............291
䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED .............292
▫ TIREFIT Storage ......................293
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation .....293
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions...............294
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT ..............296
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................302
▫ Jack Location ........................303
▫ Spare Tire Removal ....................303
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................306
▫ Jacking Instructions ...................307
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................313
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE ............313
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............314
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................316
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............317
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ................319
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal,
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles
(160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/hr).
292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located under the front driver’s seat.
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Deflation Button
3. Pressure Gauge
TIREFIT Kit Location
TIREFIT Components
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293
4. Power Button
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear)
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sys-
tem. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use. After each use, always replace
these components immediately at an authorized stu-
dio.
•
When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean water,
and a damp cloth will remove the material from the
vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only in-
tended to seal punctures less than ¼ in (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 in. (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE-
FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respira-
tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295
WARNING! (Continued)
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil-
dren. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary
to place the valve stem in this position before proceed-
ing.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the igni-
tion.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE-
FIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
On the TIREFIT kit.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
psi (5 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual
tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle”.
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar), the tire is too
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized studio or tire
service center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized studio as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment.”
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized studio or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the TIREFIT service kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous-
ing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under
the front driver’s seat.
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the
cargo area.
1. Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area.
Jack And Jack-Handle Location
Winch Access Plug Right Side Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303
2. Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut. Use the wrench
to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on
the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you
to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench tool only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and they can dam-
age the winch.
Winch Access Plug Center Location Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle. 4. When the spare is clear, remove the knob or plastic
molded nut by rotating it counter-clockwise.
Spare Tire
Plastic Molded Nut
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305
5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the center of the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission)
or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn Off the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
Retainer
306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of the
“Tires-General Information” under “Starting And Oper-
ating” for information about the spare tire, it’s use, and
operation.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the
driver’s seat.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each
side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift point
symbol on the sill molding).
Jack Warning Label
308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309
3. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the
jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest
to the wheel to be changed.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
4. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
Jack Location
310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Before using the swivel wrench to remove the
wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel
by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into
the notched part of the center cap.
5. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the
hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels,
the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel
bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Center Cap Removal
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel bolts. When reinstalling the original wheel, prop-
erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the
wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel bolts.
6. Install the spare wheel and wheel bolts with the cone
shaped end of the bolts toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the bolts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel bolts. Alternate bolts until
each bolt has been tightened twice. The correct wheel
bolt torque is 63 ft lbs (85 N·m) for steel wheels and 75
ft lbs (100 N·m) for aluminum wheels. If you doubt
that you have tightened the bolts correctly, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
studio or service station.
9. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the
bag. Stow it under the driver’s seat and secure the bag
to the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Have
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
11. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure as required.
Spare Tire Stowage
Reverse instructions of the spare removal section.
Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut
clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click
is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting, there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
Battery Posts
1 — Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
2 — Negative (-) Post
314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized studio.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear
and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accel-
erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the
engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lever override access cover (located
on the right side of the shift lever housing) by prying
at the bottom edge of the cover.
Shift Lever Override Access Hole
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the
access hole, and push and hold the override release
lever in.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max
distance
If transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 65 mph (104 km/h)
max speed
Wheel Lift Rear
Front OK OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is
discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Automatic Transmission
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Manual Transmission
• Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
After the event occurs, when the system is active, the
message ⬙Fuel Cutoff See Handbook⬙ is displayed.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323
System Reset Procedure
After an impact causing airbag deployment, the left and
right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel
cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned
off.
In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you
must follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition OFF.
(Turn Signal Switch Must
be placed in Neutral
State).
2. Turn ignition ON. Left Turn Light is OFF.
Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Light
is ON SOLID.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Left Turn Light is OFF.
Right Turn Light is OFF.
8. Turn ignition OFF. System is now reset and
the engine may be
started.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers
OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within
45 seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and
the reset procedure must be performed again in order to
be successful.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L ..........329
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .330
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .331
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................331
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................333
䡵 STUDIO SERVICE ......................333
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........334
▫ Engine Oil ..........................335
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................338
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................338
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............339
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............340
▫ Body Lubrication .....................344
▫ Wiper Blades ........................344
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................347
▫ Exhaust System ......................347
▫ Cooling System ......................349
▫ Brake System ........................355
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped ........357
7
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ......358
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................360
▫ Convertible Top Care – If Equipped ........367
䡵 FUSES ..............................369
▫ Interior Fuses ........................369
▫ Underhood Fuses......................371
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................374
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................374
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................376
▫ Headlamps ..........................376
▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps .............................376
▫ Front Fog Lamps ......................377
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps............377
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps .............................377
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .378
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................379
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................379
▫ Engine .............................379
▫ Chassis ............................380
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses)
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized studio for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized studio or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance
and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de-
signed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine
parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by
the manufacturer’s warranty.
STUDIO SERVICE
Your authorized studio has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
WARNING! (Continued)
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized studio or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut
off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the
dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone.
Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full
end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever occurs first.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Engine Oil Viscosity - 1.4L Turbo (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for
all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized studio, service
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
CAUTION! (Continued)
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized studio
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized studio or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the
lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the T20 Torx screw that secures the passenger
side console closeout cover.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
3. Remove the two 5.5mm screws (1 and 2) that secure
the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing.
T20 Torx screw Console Closeout panel
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indica-
tors.
5. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
A/C Air Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
6. Install the passenger side console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up-
ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
WARNING! (Continued)
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be flushed with
OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL
RANGE”.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-
12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protec-
tion of your engine which contains aluminum compo-
nents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also
reduce braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
mission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both
the brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized studio for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
(Continued)
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid speci-
fications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized studio can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized studio immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
CAUTION!
• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your au-
thorized studio immediately. Severe transmission
damage may occur. Your authorized studio has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the ⬙Maintenance Schedule⬙ for the proper
maintenance intervals. In addition, change the fluid and
filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized studio has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Convertible Top Care – If Equipped
NOTE: Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every
2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam-
age the top material. Also, increased water pressure
may force past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the top
is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles
interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicles interior.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and storage compartment.
Washing
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
preferred.
CAUTION!
Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force water past the weather strips.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in
partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle
before washing the top. The top should be washed with
a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap
solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use
detergent.
CAUTION!
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol-
vents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering
it into the storage area.
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the
entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and
chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.
Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will
decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt,
and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings
may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains
persist, contact your local authorized studio for further
suggestions.
FUSES
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
Cavity
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
1 F12 7.5
Amp
Brown
Right Low Beam
2 F32 5 Amp
Tan
Front and Rear
Ceiling Lights
Trunk and Door
Courtesy Lights
3 F53 5 Amp
Tan
Instrument Panel
Node
4 F38 20 Amp
Yellow
Central Door Lock-
ing
5 F36 10 Amp
Red
Diagnostic Socket,
Car Radio, Climate
Control System
Cavity
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
6 F43 20 Amp
Yellow
Bi-Directional
Washer
7 F48 20 Amp
Yellow
Passenger Power
Window
8 F13 7.5
Amp
Brown
Left Low Beam,
Headlamp Leveling
9 F50 7.5
Amp
Brown
Airbag
10 F51 5 Amp
Tan
Car Radio Switch,
Climate Control
System, Stop Light,
Clutch
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
11 F37 5 Amp
Tan
Stop Light Switch,
Instrument Panel
Node
12 F49 5 Amp
Tan
Exterior Mirror,
GPS, Electric Mir-
ror, Parking Sensor
13 F31 5 Amp
Tan
Ignition, Climate
Control
14 F47 20 Amp
Yellow
Driver Power Win-
dow
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Front Distribution Unit
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
Cavity
Maxi
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp
Blue
Body Controller
F02 20 Amp
Yellow
Audio Amplifier
F03 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp
Orange
Anti-Lock Brake
Pump
F05 70 Amp
Tan
Electric Power
Steering
F06 20 Amp
Yellow
Radiator Fan -
Single Speed
F06 30 Amp
Green
Radiator Fan -
Low Speed
Cavity
Maxi
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
F07 40 Amp
Orange
Radiator Fan -
High Speed
F08 30 Amp
Green
Blower Motor
F09 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain
F10 10 Amp
Red
Horn
F11 15 Amp
Blue
Powertrain
F11 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain
(Multiair – If
Equipped)
F14 5 Amp
Tan
High beam
(Shutter)
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Maxi
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
F15 15 Amp
Blue
Cigar Lighter
F16 7.5 Amp
Brown
Transmission
F17 25 Amp
White
Powertrain (Multi-
air – If Equipped)
F17 15 Amp
Blue
Powertrain
F18 15 Amp
Blue
Powertrain
F18 5 Amp
Tan
Powertrain (Multi-
air – If Equipped)
F19 7.5 Amp
Brown
Air Conditioning
Cavity
Maxi
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
F20 15 Amp
Blue
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
F21 15 Amp
Blue
Fuel Pump
F23 20 Amp
Yellow
Anti-Lock Brake
Valves
F24 7.5 Amp
Brown
Stability Control
System
F30 15 Amp
Blue
Fog Lamps
F82 30 Amp
Green
Sunroof/
Convertible Top
F84 10 Amp
Red
Transmission
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
Cavity
Maxi
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
F85 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Defroster,
Heated Mirrors
F87 5 Amp
Tan
Lights
F90 5 Amp
Tan
Heated Mirrors
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High
Beam Headlamp
HIR2
Front Parking/Daytime
Running Lamps
W21/5W
Front Fog Lamps H11
Front Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Side Direction Lamps W5W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
Rear Tail and Stop
Lamps
PY21W/5W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
Bulb Number
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp
W5W
License Plate Lamps LED (See Authorized stu-
dio)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized studio.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
studio or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps
1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right.
2. Open the wheel housing access door.
3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp
housing.
4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized
studio.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand
access to side marker lamp.
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the wheel liner.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly.
3. Remove the four screws (using a T20 driver) and
separate the backplate from the lamp housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening
screws.
2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly.
3. Disconnect the electric connector.
4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and re-
place it.
6. Close the back cap locking it properly.
7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the
guard caps.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 10.5 Gallons 40 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula) —
with Manual Transmission
4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters
1.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula) —
with Automatic Transmission
5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant - 1.4L/1.4L Turbo
Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil - 1.4L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil - 1.4L Turbo Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10896. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter - 1.4L/1.4L Turbo
Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs - 1.4L/1.4L Turbo
Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.026in [.65 mm])
Fuel Selection - 1.4L/1.4L Turbo En-
gine
87 Octane Acceptable — 91 Octane Recommended
Chassis
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® AW-1 Transmission
Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703
should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
384 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and
hoses.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Check and adjust hand brake.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 385
Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, and re-
place if necessary.
XXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings, park-
ing brake function.
XXXXXXX
386 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X X X X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
Replace the timing belt. X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 387
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
388 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................390
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............390
▫ Prepare A List ........................390
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............390
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............390
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............391
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................391
▫ Service Contract ......................392
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............393
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............393
▫
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . .393
▫ In Canada...........................394
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............394
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................395
▫ Treadwear...........................395
▫ Traction Grades .......................396
▫ Temperature Grades....................396
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized studio, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized studio are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized studio.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized studio. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized studio have the
390 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
studio service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized studio.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized studio is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized studio name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (888) 242–6342
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 391
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized studio
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
392 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized stu-
dio, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 393
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other infor-
mation about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
394 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
• Call toll free at:
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
• Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 395
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
396 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 397
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............351
Adding Fuel .............................284
Adding Washer Fluid ......................347
Additives, Fuel ...........................282
Airbag ...............................40, 50
Airbag Deployment ........................53
Airbag Light .....................48, 55, 79, 146
Airbag Maintenance ........................54
Airbag, Side ......................43, 46, 49, 50
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........44, 46, 50
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .338
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................340
Air Conditioning..........................204
Air Conditioning Controls ...................204
Air Conditioning Filter .....................341
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............340, 341
Air Conditioning System .............204, 207, 340
Air Pressure, Tires.........................263
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............350, 379
Capacities ............................379
Disposal ..............................353
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................242
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................152
Appearance Care .........................360
Automatic Dimming Mirror...................90
Automatic Door Locks ......................24
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........207
Automatic Transaxle ........................11
Automatic Transmission .................224, 358
Adding Fluid ..........................359
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................360
Fluid Level Check .......................359
Fluid Type ............................358
Gear Ranges ...........................227
Special Additives .......................359
Autostick ...............................232
400 INDEX
Battery.................................339
Jump Starting ..........................313
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........19
Belts, Seat ...............................79
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................344
B-Pillar Location ..........................258
Brake Assist System .......................244
Brake Fluid .............................380
Brake, Parking ...........................238
Brakes .................................355
Brake System .........................242, 355
Anti-Lock (ABS) .....................242, 244
Master Cylinder ........................355
Parking ..............................238
Warning Light .........................151
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................226
Bulb Replacement......................374, 376
Bulbs, Light...........................81, 374
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........379
Capacities, Fluid ..........................379
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................284
Oil (Engine) ........................336, 337
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................78, 284
Cargo Area Features .......................136
Car Washes .............................361
CD (Compact Disc) Player ...................174
Cellular Phone ...........................203
Chains, Tire .............................271
Changing A Flat Tire .......................302
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................253
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............149, 331
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............77
Checks, Safety ............................77
Child Restraint ............................56
Clean Air Gasoline ........................280
10
INDEX 401
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................362
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................344
Climate Control ..........................204
Clutch .................................355
Clutch Fluid .............................355
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............203
Compact Spare Tire........................267
Connector
UCI.................................200
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........200
Contract, Service ..........................392
Convertible Top Maintenance .................367
Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................379
Cooling System...........................349
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............351
Coolant Level ......................350, 353
Disposal of Used Coolant .................353
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................350
Inspection ............................353
Points to Remember ..................352, 354
Pressure Cap ..........................352
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............350
Corrosion Protection .......................360
Cruise Light .............................146
Cupholders .............................134
Customer Assistance .......................390
Data Recorder, Event .......................55
Daytime Running Lights ....................111
Defroster, Windshield ................80, 206, 212
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................331
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ..................359
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................353
Door Locks ..............................21
Door Locks, Automatic ......................24
402 INDEX
Downshifting ............................223
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ................................235
Electrical Power Outlets.....................130
Electric Remote Mirrors......................91
Electronic Brake Control System ...............244
Brake Assist System .....................244
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........119
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............247
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)......156
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................291
Jacking ...............................302
Jump Starting ..........................313
Towing ..............................320
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........331
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................338
Break-In Recommendations .................77
Checking Oil Level ......................335
Compartment .......................329, 330
Cooling ..............................349
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................78, 284
Fails to Start ...........................220
Flooded, Starting .......................220
Fuel Requirements ...................279, 280
Oil ..............................335, 379
Oil Filler Cap .......................336, 337
Oil Selection ...........................336
Oil Synthetic ..........................337
Overheating ...........................291
Starting ..............................219
Temperature Gauge ......................153
Enhanced Accident Response Feature.........51, 323
Event Data Recorder ........................55
10
INDEX 403
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................26, 78, 284
Exhaust System ........................78, 347
Exterior Lights ............................81
Filler Location Fuel ........................155
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................338
Air Conditioning .......................341
Engine Fuel ...........................379
Engine Oil ............................338
Engine Oil Disposal .....................337
Flashers
Turn Signal ............................81
Flooded Engine Starting ....................220
Fluid, Brake .............................380
Fluid Capacities ..........................379
Fluid Leaks ..............................82
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................359
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........379
Fog Lights ...........................114,145
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................317
Fuel ...............................279, 280
Adding ..............................284
Additives .............................282
Capacity .............................379
Clean Air .............................280
Cutoff ................................51
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ..................155, 284
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ....................155
Gasoline ..........................279, 280
Gauge ...............................155
Light ................................145
Materials Added ........................282
Octane Rating ......................279, 280
Requirements .......................279, 280
Tank Capacity ..........................379
Fueling ................................284
404 INDEX
Fuses ..................................369
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ................284, 286
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................280
Gasoline (Fuel) ....................279, 280, 379
Gasoline, Reformulated..................280, 281
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .....................153
Fuel .................................155
Odometer .............................154
Tachometer ............................155
Gear Ranges .............................227
Gear Select Lever Override ..................319
General Information .....................15, 279
General Maintenance.......................334
Glass Cleaning ...........................365
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Stand-
ing Water .............................235
Headlights ..............................110
Cleaning .............................365
High Beam ............................145
Passing ..............................111
Switch ...............................111
Heated Mirrors............................93
Heated Seats.............................105
Heater .................................204
Hill Start Assist...........................245
Holder, Cup .............................134
Hood Release ............................108
Ignition .................................11
Key..................................11
Ignition Key Removal .......................11
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................13
10
INDEX 405
Infant Restraint ...........................56
Information Center, Vehicle ..................156
Instrument Cluster ........................144
Instrument Panel and Controls ................141
Instrument Panel Cover .....................366
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............366
Interior Appearance Care....................364
Interior Lighting ..........................113
Introduction ..............................4
Jacking Instructions........................307
Jack Location ............................303
Jack Operation ........................302, 307
Jump Starting ............................313
Key-In Reminder ..........................13
Key, Replacement ..........................14
Keys ...................................11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................13
Lane Change and Turn Signals ................145
Lane Change Assist ........................112
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................30
Latches .................................82
Hood ................................108
Lead Free Gasoline .....................279, 280
Leaks, Fluid ..............................82
Life of Tires .............................269
Liftgate (Sedan) ...........................25
Light Bulbs ...........................81, 374
Lights ...............................81, 110
Airbag .......................48, 55, 79, 146
Anti-Lock .............................152
Brake Assist Warning ....................250
Brake Warning .........................151
Bulb Replacement .......................376
Engine Temperature Warning ...............150
406 INDEX
Exterior ...............................81
Fog .................................145
High Beam ............................111
High Beam Indicator .....................145
Low Fuel .............................145
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........149
Oil Pressure ...........................149
Park .................................111
Passing ..............................111
Seat Belt Reminder ......................146
Service ...............................376
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .149
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............147
Traction Control ........................250
Turn Signal ......................81, 111, 145
Voltage ..............................146
Wait to Start ...........................144
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......144
Loading Vehicle
Tires ................................258
Locks
Automatic Door .........................24
Door .................................21
Power Door ............................23
Lubrication, Body .........................344
Maintenance Free Battery....................339
Maintenance, General ......................334
Maintenance Procedures ....................334
Maintenance Schedule ......................384
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .149, 331
Manual, Service ..........................394
Manual Transmission ...................221, 357
Fluid Level Check .......................358
Frequency of Fluid Change ................358
Lubricant Selection ......................357
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................355
10
INDEX 407
Mirrors .................................89
Automatic Dimming ......................90
Electric Powered .........................91
Heated ...............................93
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................274
Multi-Function Control Lever .................110
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................77
Occupant Restraints ......................46, 53
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ........27, 43, 44, 46, 50
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............279, 280
Odometer...............................154
Trip.................................154
Oil Change Indicator .......................160
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................160
Oil, Engine ..........................335, 379
Capacity .............................379
Change Interval ........................335
Checking .............................335
Disposal ..............................337
Filter ................................338
Filter Disposal .........................337
Identification Logo ......................336
Materials Added to ......................337
Recommendation ....................336, 379
Synthetic .............................337
Viscosity ..........................336, 337
Oil Filter, Selection ........................338
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................331
Operating Precautions ......................331
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............5
Overheating, Engine ....................154, 291
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........5,394
Paint Care ..............................360
Parking Brake............................238
408 INDEX
Passing Light ............................111
Pets....................................76
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........258
Power
Door Locks ............................23
Mirrors ...............................91
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........130
Steering ..............................237
Sunroof ..............................127
Windows ..............................24
Power Steering Fluid.......................380
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................39
Preparation for Jacking .....................306
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................37
Radial Ply Tires ..........................265
Radio Operation.......................174, 203
Radio Reception ..........................174
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................174
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) .......................25
Rear Window Features .....................137
Recorder, Event Data .......................55
Recreational Towing .......................287
Reformulated Gasoline .....................280
Refrigerant ..............................341
Release, Hood............................108
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................38
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
FCC General Information ..................21
Power Convertible Top Function .............17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........201
Replacement Bulbs ........................374
Replacement Keys .........................14
Replacement Parts.........................333
Replacement Tires .........................270
Reporting Safety Defects ....................393
Restraints, Child...........................56
10
INDEX 409
Rotation, Tires ...........................273
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................79
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................81
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................393
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................78
Safety Information, Tire .....................251
Safety Tips ...............................77
Schedule, Maintenance .....................384
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................367
Seat Belt Reminder .........................38
Seat Belts ................................79
And Pregnant Women .....................39
Child Restraint ..........................56
Extender ..............................39
Front Seat .............................30
Inspection .............................79
Pretensioners ...........................37
Rear Seat ..............................30
Untwisting Procedure .....................35
Seat Belts (Sedan) ..........................27
Seats ..................................101
Adjustment ...........................101
Heated ...............................105
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................13
Service Assistance .........................390
Service Contract ..........................392
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .149
Service Manuals ..........................394
Shift Lever Override .......................319
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission .............223
Shoulder Belts ............................30
Side Airbag ..............................49
Signals, Turn ..........................81, 111
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................271
Snow Tires ..............................266
Spare Tire...............................267
Spark Plugs .............................379
410 INDEX
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............119,146
Speedometer.............................155
Sport Mode .............................240
Starting ................................219
Automatic Transmission ..................219
Cold Weather ..........................220
Engine Fails to Start .....................220
Manual Transmission ....................219
Steering
Power ...............................237
Tilt Column ...........................118
Wheel, Tilt ............................118
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............201
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .201
Storage ................................374
Storage, Vehicle .......................214, 374
Storing Your Vehicle .......................374
Stuck, Freeing............................317
Studio Service............................333
Sun Roof ...............................127
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........40
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................337
Tachometer..............................155
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........207
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ........153, 292
Tilt Steering Column .......................118
Tire and Loading Information Placard...........258
TIREFIT ................................292
Tire Markings ............................251
Tires.............................81, 262, 395
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................269
Air Pressure ...........................262
Chains ...............................271
Changing .............................302
Compact Spare .........................267
General Information .....................262
High Speed ...........................264
10
INDEX 411
Inflation Pressures .......................263
Jacking ...............................302
Life of Tires ...........................269
Load Capacity ......................258, 259
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............274
Pressure Warning Light ...................147
Quality Grading ........................395
Radial ...............................265
Replacement ...........................270
Rotation ..............................273
Safety ............................251, 262
Sizes ................................253
Snow Tires ............................266
Spinning .............................268
Tread Wear Indicators ....................268
Tire Safety Information .....................251
To Open Hood ...........................108
Towing ................................286
Disabled Vehicle ........................320
Recreational ...........................287
Traction .............................234, 235
Traction Control ..........................245
Trailer Towing ...........................286
Transaxle
Automatic .............................11
Autostick .............................232
Transmission
Automatic .........................224, 358
Fluid ................................358
Maintenance ...........................358
Manual ..............................221
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .19
Transporting Pets ..........................76
Tread Wear Indicators ......................268
Trip Odometer ...........................154
Turn Signals ..........................111,145
UCI Connector ...........................200
412 INDEX
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................395
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .200
Unleaded Gasoline .....................279, 280
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................35
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............7
Vehicle Loading ..........................259
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............8
Vehicle Storage........................214, 374
Wait to Start Light.........................144
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .144
Warnings and Cautions.......................7
Warranty Information ....................4,393
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................347
Washers, Windshield ....................115,117
Washing Vehicle ..........................361
Water
Driving Through ........................235
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................362
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................362
Wind Buffeting ........................25, 129
Window Fogging .........................213
Windows ................................24
Power ................................24
Windshield Defroster ....................80, 206
Windshield Washers ....................115,117
Windshield Wiper Blades....................344
Windshield Wipers ........................115
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................344
10
INDEX 413
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2013
2013 FIAT 500
13FF500-126-AF Sixth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FIAT 500
FCA US LLC
